‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .11‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺷﻜﺮًﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗ ﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏ ﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣ ﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺬﺭ‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬

‫‪$‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪AR 2‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ‪12 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬‫)‪35 ......................................(BULB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫)ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء( ‪36 ................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪37 .....‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪38 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪39 ..................(n‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪13 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)‪40 ................(Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪40 ....‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪15 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ "‪41 .......................... "My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ "‪42 ........................."My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪43 ...........‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪14 ......................................‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪14 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪16 .............................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪17 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪18 ...............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪18 ..................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ‪20 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪20 ...‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪21 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪22 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪24 ......................iAUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪26 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪28 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪30 ..............PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ "ﺻﻮّﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ"‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪32 ...........................(P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪33 ............. (A‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪34 ..................(S‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪35 .......................... (M‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪44 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪45 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪45 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪47 .................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪47 ....... (AE Lock‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪48 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪48 ................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪49 ........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫)‪50 ........................(Super Spot AF‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪51 ......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ‪52 ..............................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪52 ............(Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‪53 ........................................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪53 ................................. ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪54 .........‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪55 ..............‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪56 ........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪57 ...‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )‪58 ........(Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)]♥[‪58 ..................................(Silent‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪59 ...........‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪60 .................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪61 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪62 .............‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪64 ......................‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪64 ......................(Button Function‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪68 ...........‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ‪69 ..............................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ‪69 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ‪69 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫)ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪70 ................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫)‪71 ........................... (Color Space‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪72 .....................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪72 ......................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪74‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪74 ..........‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪74 ...............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪75 .......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪76 ............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪77 ................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪77 ..........................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪78 ................................‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪79 .................................‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪79 ..................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪79 ...................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪80 ......................... ([Share Order‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫]‪80 ......................([Erase Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪81 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪81 .........................‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪82‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪82 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪83 ........................ Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪83 ..............(Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪83 ...... (Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪84 .... (Reset‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪84 ...... (Myset‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪85 ...... (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪85 .........................(K‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫)‪86 ............ (Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪86 ............. (j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬‫)‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء( ‪87 ......................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ‪88 .............‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪HDR‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ‪91 ...................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪92 ..........‬‬‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬‫)‪93 .................... (Keystone Comp.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬‫)]♥[‪94 ...........(Anti-Shockz/Silent‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪94 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪95 ....................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻔﺔ )‪95 ..................(R‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪95 ..........................‬‬

‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺎﺕ ‪97 ..........................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪120 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪98 ............................‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪98 ....................‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪98 ....................‬‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪98 ..................‬‬‫‪98 .................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪98 ........................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪98 ....................... c Menu Display‬‬‫‪98 .................................. Firmware‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪121 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪99 .......................‬‬‫‪99 .................................. AF/MF R‬‬‫‪100 ......................... Button/Dial S‬‬‫‪100 ....................... Release/j T‬‬‫‪101 ........................Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫‪103 ....................... Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫‪104 ..........................# Custom W‬‬‫‪104 .....................K/Color/WB X‬‬‫‪105 .....................Record/Erase Y‬‬‫‪106 ................................. Movie Z‬‬‫‪108 ........................Built-In EVF b‬‬‫‪108 ............................K Utility k‬‬‫‪109 ................................. AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪110 ................................MF Assist‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪110 .........‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫)‪112 .............. (KControl Settings‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪113 ...................‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪114 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪114 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪115 ........‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪122‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪122 ................‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪122 .......................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪121 ......‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪123 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪125 .......... (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪125 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪126 ..........................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪127 .......................(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪127 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪128 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪129‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪129 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪129 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪130 ............................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪131 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪132‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪133‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪133 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪133 .............‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪134 ..............‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪116‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪117 .............................‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪135 ............................‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪136 ....................................‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪118 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪118 ........‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪119 ............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪120 ............................‬‬‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪138‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪138 .................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪140 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪142 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪142 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪142 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪142 ........................................‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪143 ...............................‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪144 ......................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪151 ..................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪153 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪156‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪156 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫‪162‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫‪(A) iAUTO‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪59‬‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪47‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ً‬‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪34‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪54‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪55‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪68‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫‪37‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪AF Area‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪48‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪) C-AF+TR‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ISO/DIS Mode‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪/Image Stabilizer‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪Anti-shock‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪57‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫‪135‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪53/26‬‬‫‪58/56‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪62‬‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪36‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺨﺎﺕ(‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫‪65‬‬‫‪Test Picture‬‬‫‪65‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪52‬‬‫‪103‬‬‫‪101/98‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫‪101‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪(Rec View) AUTOq‬‬‫‪98‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫‪47/21‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪57‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫‪57‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Quick Sleep Mode‬‬‫‪109‬‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪60‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪118‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫‪58‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪HDMI/Video Out‬‬‫‪101‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪110‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫‪78‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Shadow Adj‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Redeye Fix‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫‪125‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪127‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪118‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪119‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
‫‪17‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Myset‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪98‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ* )‪(o‬‬‫‪ ........‬ﺹ‪76 ،67 – 66 ،61 ،47–46 ،35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) R‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ............. H/‬ﺹ‪/64 ،38 .‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪............................ Fn2‬ﺹ‪66 ،64 ،52 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪23 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ* )‪(r‬‬‫‪ ........‬ﺹ‪76 ،67 – 66 ،61 ،47–46 ،35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪.....................‬ﺹ‪97 ،80 ،72 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ........................................ Fn3‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ........................ ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪62 ،16 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪/57 .‬ﺹ‪99 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ r‬ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬

‫‪d c‬‬

‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪g‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ( ‪ .....‬ﺹ‪81 ،74 ،45 ،20 ،18 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪135 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .................................(LV) u‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ........................................ Fn1‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ............................... INFO‬ﺹ‪75 ،21 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ* ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪76 ،48 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) q‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ................................ Q‬ﺹ‪82 ،4445 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .................................. MENU‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫‪ f‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ...........‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫‪ j‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ .................... (D‬ﺹ‪110 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪125 ،122 ،110 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ HIGF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ً‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB6‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪(C‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(129 .‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬ﻭ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪ (130 .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﱢ‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(130 .‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ً‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ‪.(18 .‬‬‫‪AR 14‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫• ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪.(3‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪.(132 .‬‬‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.OFF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.ON‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬‫‪) :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗُﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Quick Sleep Mode‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪" v .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ"‬‫)ﺹ‪.(99 .‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j/Y /‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪) [d‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [d‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[d‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪2015‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 0‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪.[min‬‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪cd‬‬‫‪e UTO1‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪g TO‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i 3‬‬‫‪j N‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬

‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0a‬‬‫‪b‬‬‫‪FPS‬‬‫‪off‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi FP RC BKT‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪-2.0‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬

‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬

‫‪+7‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪q p‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪121–116 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ............................. Super FP‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ....................................... RC‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪/88 .‬ﺹ‪91 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪92 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪101 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ٍ‬‫‪ .................................. S-OVF n‬ﺹ‪108 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪87 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .....m‬ﺹ‪141 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ٍ :‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪23 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/Anti-shock‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬‫‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪58 – 57 .‬‬‫‪AR 18‬‬

‫‪E‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪x‬‬
‫‪w‬‬

‫‪vuts‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪ m‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪131 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪ q‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ...............................................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪109 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪39 – 22 .‬‬‫‪ ............................................Myset x‬ﺹ‪84 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ .........‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ B‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ E‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi RL‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 DF‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪n WMUTX 01:02:03‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪ G‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪106 ،72 .‬‬‫‪ H‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫‪ I‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ ..................................Movie Effect J‬ﺹ‪39 .‬‬‫‪ K‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪107 .‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗُﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪2014.01.01‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻫ ًﺘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(21 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪1‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪2‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻷﻓﻖ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪.................. A‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫‪................... SCN‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪................... ART‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪........................J‬ﺹ‪30 .‬‬‫‪........................ P‬ﺹ‪32 .‬‬‫‪........................A‬ﺹ‪33 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫‪........................ S‬ﺹ‪34 .‬‬‫‪........................M‬ﺹ‪35 .‬‬‫‪...................... n‬ﺹ‪38 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )((‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(138 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪] v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ )ﺹ‪(37 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫‪23 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪iAUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ‬‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪AR 24‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ k‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ a‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪ [Blur Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Express Motions‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪.3‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ّ ،‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﻭ ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Blurred Motion‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )‪.(GF‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫‪Landscape‬‬‫‪Landscape+Portrait‬‬‫‪Sport‬‬‫‪Hand-Held Starlight‬‬‫‪Night Scene‬‬‫‪Night+Portrait‬‬‫‪Children‬‬

‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪s‬‬

‫‪High Key‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫‪DIS Mode‬‬‫‪Macro‬‬‫‪Nature Macro‬‬‫‪Candle‬‬‫‪Sunset‬‬‫‪Documents‬‬‫‪) Panorama‬ﺹ‪(27 .‬‬‫( ‪Fireworks‬‬‫‪Beach & Snow g‬‬‫‪n Fisheye Effect f‬‬‫‪n Wide-Angle w‬‬‫‪n Macro m‬‬‫‪3D Photo T‬‬‫‪Panning J‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[e-Portrait‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ]‪ ،[n Wide-Angle] ،[n Fisheye Effect‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Macro‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[Panorama] ،[Hand-Held Starlight] ،[e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3D Photo‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Hand-Held Starlight‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪AR 26‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1024 × 1824‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪.100%‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ I‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻓﻲ ‪ SCN‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[3‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[2‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﻱ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪k‬‬

‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪l‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻛﻜﻞ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪ Pale&Light Color‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬

‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪s‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪t‬‬‫‪Cross Process‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﺑﺆﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺸﻰء ‪ Cross Process II‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪u‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Gentle Sepia‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y‬‬‫‪Key Line‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑًﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Watercolor‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪Vintage‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻨﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺘﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﺤﻮﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫‪Partial Color‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪u‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫ً‬‫)‪.(GF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪ART‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ II‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ*‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﻧﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬‫* ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ "ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﻼﺻﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪COLOR‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .PHOTO STORY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪Standard :A‬‬‫‪Speed :B‬‬‫‪Zoom In/Out :C‬‬‫‪Layout :D‬‬‫‪Fun Frames :F‬‬‫‪Works in progress :Q‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،I‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺐ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪HGF‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Finish later‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(31 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Discard‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 30‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.O‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫]‪.[4:3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﻮ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ]‪ [MF] ،[S-AF] ،[AF Mode‬ﻭ ]‪ [S-AF+MF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪/Movie‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﻮ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪Picture mode/Digital Tele-converter/‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ INFO/Fn2/Fn1‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Q Works in progress‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫"ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ّ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )!(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "s‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ "‪."s‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻼ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ً‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫ِ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪(S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬‫"‪4000 250 125 60 30 15 60‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪2000 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫‪125 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫ِ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫‪AR 34‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪(M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/4000‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Live View Boost‬ﺹ‪ (101 .‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Custom Menu‬‬‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) [Noise Reduct.] v .‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪(BULB‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪:(BULB‬‬‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ )‪ :(TIME‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴَﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) "Bulb/Time Monitor" v‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Live Bulb‬ﺹ‪ (103 .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(135 .‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ* ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [Live Bulb‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Live Time‬ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮ ّﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Composite Settings‬ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[LIVECOMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Composite Settings‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(135 .‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪T‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ) ‪( V‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ S‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Off‬‬‫‪3x‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬‫‪ Y‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪/e-portrait/3D/Panorama‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪.(PHOTO STORY) J‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪42mm‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪00 R‬‬‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 NDF‬‬‫‪00:04‬‬‫‪29:55‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪12800‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +3.0‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .All-Intra‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪/(.‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/Panorama/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Hand-Held ،e-Portrait) SCN‬‬‫‪/(3D ،Starlight‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(n‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ ،(n‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪" v .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" )ﺹ‪(72 .‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Movie Tele‬‬‫‪converter‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫‪Movie Tele-converter‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Movie tele-converter‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ N‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ mode1‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪ ،(107 .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪.Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻭ ]‪ [Diorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ‪.Art Fade‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Art Fade‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪.Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪(Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ .R‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.(16:9) XN‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪) [Movie+Photo Mode] v .‬ﺹ‪(107 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[mode1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 30p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ*‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪42mm‬‬‫‪00:04‬‬‫‪29:55‬‬‫‪AR 40‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪00 R‬‬‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 NDF‬‬‫‪12800‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +3.0‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪HD N‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD SF‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD F FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ MOV FHD F 30p‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪ [Frame Rate‬ﻭ ]‪.[Clip Recording Time‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ R‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،My Clips‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﻳُﻐﻴّﺮ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.c‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Play My Clips‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .GF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ q‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬

‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪21‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬

‫‪2015.1‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫‪Q‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪(41 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Play My Clips‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫‪Rearrange Order‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Preset Destination‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ c My Clips‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Delete My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ .My Clips‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Yes‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪AR 42‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Export My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Clip Effects‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Transition Effect‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Volume‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Joy‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Sound‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Preview‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤُﺠﻤّﻊ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ ‪.Fine‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Begin Export‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ nc‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪HD N‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD SF‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) MOVnFHD F 30p‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ( ﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻄﻲء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻫﻮ ]‪.[All-Intra‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [60p‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[50p‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ً 120‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ]‪.[SD‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪HS‬‬‫‪120fps‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) y‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫‪HighSpeed 120fps‬‬‫‪HS‬‬‫‪120fps‬‬‫‪H I‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪c ba‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ ................................N‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ ..........................................J‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ‪ .........................................T‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ..................................z‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ......................x‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ......................... y‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪61 ،60 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪) "Quick Sleep Mode" v .‬ﺹ‪(109 .‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ SCN ،A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ART‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ KControl Settings‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Live Control‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ART ،M ،S ،A ،P ،A‬ﻭ ‪) .SCN‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ* ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ*‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ* ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ*‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ*‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪AR 46‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ............................................. *n‬ﺹ‪39 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..........................................*ISO‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ* ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫• ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 8‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪ r‬ﺃﻭ ‪HI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ )"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )"–"( ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑـ ‪.±5.0 EV‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ )‪(0‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–(‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .±3.0 EV‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ ،±3.0 EV‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.±3.0 EV‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪(AE Lock‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Fn1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪"AEL/AFL" v .u‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(109 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ً 81‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Image Aspect] ،[Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺹ‪.(49 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪GF‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪) o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬‫‪) I‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪) K‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) J‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Face Priority Off‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Face & Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪Face & R. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Face & L. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[(Digital ESP metering) p‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[MF‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪(Super Spot AF‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪) U‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪Q /‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪) a‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[Button Function‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(64 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪(14× ،10× ،7× ،5× ،3×) .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(o‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪AUTOS-AF C-AF‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫‪S-AF+MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪ S-AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ؛ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ (MF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MF‬‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Highlight&Shadow Control‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ [Highlight&Shadow Control] .‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Multi Function‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(66 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Multi Function‬ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‬‫‪ .Fn2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪HI LIGHT‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Color Creator‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ [Color Creator] .‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [Multi Function‬ﺹ‪ .(66 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Multi Function‬ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Color Creator‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ّ Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪color creator‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ‪ Color Creator‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ (Color Creator) c‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(68 .‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ]‪ [Color Creator‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AUTO‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫‪SHADOW‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪ ([I Face Priority‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ً‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪IHI‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ISH‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﻲ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ — ISO 200‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ — ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ً ISO‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪25600–200 ،LOW‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ‪(55 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰء ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪5300K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻠﺒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬‫>‬‫‪4000K‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪/P/Q‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ W/X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪– 2000K‬‬‫‪14000K‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Color Creator‬ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AUTO‬‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [W] ،[Q] ،[P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ 3 ،2 ،1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻇﻼﻻ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬‫• ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪) A‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ّ‬‫– ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪) G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ّ‬‫– ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪-5‬‬‫‪+2‬‬‫‪WB Preview‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .R‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]> ‪) [All‬ﺹ‪.(104 .‬‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣ ًﺪﺩ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Sensor Shift + Digital‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪OFF M-IS 1 M-IS‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Still-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS1‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS2‬‬‫‪Vertical Shake‬‬‫‪I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )‪ (Y‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS3‬‬‫‪Horizontal‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )‪ (Z‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪Auto I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. Off‬‬‫‪M-IS1‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )‪(VCM‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS2‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )‪ (VCM‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭ‪ 1000‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[OFF‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[S-IS AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ً [S-IS1‬‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬‫]‪.[S-IS AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪Yc‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Y12s Y2s‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪Sequential H‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 8.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Sequential L‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 12 Y12s‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 4.3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (51 .‬ﻭ ]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(109 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪YC‬‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Interval Time] ،[Frame] ،[Y Timer‬ﻭ‬‫]‪.[Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )‪.(o‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Every Frame AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪♦S‬‬‫‪Anti-Shockz‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(58 .‬‬‫‪♥S‬‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(58 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪ ،S‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪ ،T‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )‪(Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺫﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣُﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Anti-Shockz‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ .X Shooting menu 2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ♦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )]♥[‪(Silent‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(anti-shock‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ]]♥[‪ [Silent‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ .X Shooting menu 2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ♥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗُﻈﻠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ؛ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ ،XN ،YN ،YF) JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ (WN‬ﻭ ‪ .RAW‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (W‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ SF‬ﻭ‬‫‪ F‬ﻭ‪ N‬ﻭ‪.(B‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ،YF/YN/XN/WN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪) [K Set‬ﺹ‪ (104 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORF‬ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ" )ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪AR 60‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD F 60p‬‬‫‪MOV‬‬‫‪SF FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪P FHD60pF FHD 60p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪MOV FHD F 30p‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ )ﺹ‪(41 .‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 60p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪1‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD SF 60p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪3‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪MOVnFHD N 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪4‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 60p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Super Fine 60p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Normal 30p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 30p‬‬‫)‪* *(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬‫‪2 1‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫)‪*(Motion JPEG ،720×1280‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫)‪*(Motion JPEG ،480×640‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫–‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫–‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬‫‪HighSpeed 120fps‬‬‫)‪) (HighSpeed 120fps, Motion JPEG‬ﺹ‪(44 .‬‬‫–‬‫*‪ 1‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬‫*‪ All-Intra 2‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ّ‬‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،PAL‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 30p‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪ 25p‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 60p‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪.50p‬‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ #UP‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪Flash Mode‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪" v .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺹ‪(63 .‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫!‪#!/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‬‫‪ ،M‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪!SLOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﻳﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪/#SLOW2‬‬‫‪2nd‬‬‫‪Curtain‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪،#FULL‬‬‫‪ #1/4‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ ،INFO‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء([‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء([ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/250‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 62‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪A/P‬‬‫‪#AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫!‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫!‬‫‪SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪SLOW2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫!‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪2nd-C‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪/‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ $ ،#AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.A‬‬‫* ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪14-42mm F3.5-5.6 II R‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻓﻲ‬‫‪1‬ﻡ‬‫‪ED 14-42mm F3.5-5.6 EZ‬‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ED 40-150mm F4.0-5.6‬‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﻡ‬‫‪ED 14-150mm F4.0-5.6 II‬‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ f‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪(Button Function‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.cCustom Menu S‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ]‪ [Button Function‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫]‪*[GFunction] / 2*[IFunction] / 1*[RFunction] / [YFunction] / [VFunction] / [UFunction‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪*[lFunction] / (4*[P] / 3*2*[Direct Function]) [nFunction] /‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]‪ [IFunction‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[GFunction‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Direct Function‬ﻟـ‬‫]‪.[nFunction‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻳﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪k ISO / j WB‬‬‫‪k WB / j ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪ .[AEL/AFL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،AEL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [zLock‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) k‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﺹ‪.(55 .‬‬‫‪) P‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪P Home‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪ .(99 .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪RAWK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪(Test Picture) K TEST‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Myset1 – Myset4‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) I/H‬ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪/‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء(‬‫ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪) b‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) D‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ ،Peaking‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Peaking‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪AF Stop‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ BKT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Function‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Multi Function‬ﻟﻪ‪" v *.‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪Multi‬‬‫‪) "(Function‬ﺹ‪(66 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫‪) GLock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪Electronic Zoom‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬‫]‪ [Direct Function‬ﻟـ ]‪.[nFunction‬‬‫‪V Level Disp‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻓﻲ ]‪Built-in‬‬‫‪.[EVF Style‬‬‫‪S-OVF‬‬‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪n .‬‬‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫* ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪/ISO sensitivity) e ،(Color Creator) c ،(Highlight&Shadow Control) b :‬‬‫‪،(Image Aspect) d ،(Magnify) a ،(ISO sensitivity /White balance) f ،(White balance‬‬‫‪(S-OVF) n‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪(Multi Function‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Multi Function‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [Button Function‬ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Multi Function‬ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AR 66‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ّ‬‫‪‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [a‬ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Q/Fn2‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫‪500‬‬‫‪HI LIGHT‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪AUTO LOW 200‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪320‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Recommend‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫࠻࡯ࠝ‪WB‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪SHADOW‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪/ISO‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Highlight&Shadow‬‬‫‪Control‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(r‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(o‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪) (Color Creator) c‬ﺹ‪(52 .‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬‫‪) e‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(* )ﺹ‪/53 .‬‬‫ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪) f‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) *(ISO‬ﺹ‪/54 .‬‬‫ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪) (Super Spot AF) a‬ﺹ‪(50 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪) (Image Aspect) d‬ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪) (Highlight&Shadow Control) b‬ﺹ‪(52 .‬‬‫‪) *(S-OVF) n‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫–‬‫* ﺍﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Multi Function Settings‬ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ‪.(69 .‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬
‫‪U‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬

‫‪C‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Muted‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Monotone‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ّ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪Color Creator‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Color Creator‬ﺹ‪.(52 .‬‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ" )ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪Key Line Y‬‬‫‪Watercolor Z‬‬‫‪Vintage G‬‬‫‪*Partial Color H‬‬‫‪AR 68‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫*‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Partial Color‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Contrast‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Saturation‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Gradation‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪AUTO:Auto‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪NORM:Normal‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪HIGH:High Key‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪LOW:Low Key‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(B&W Filter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Picture Mode‬‬‫‪B&W Filter‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Monotone‬ﺛﻢ ]‪.[B&W Filter‬‬‫‪J Monotone‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Pict. Tone‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪.(68 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Pict. Tone‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Monotone‬ﺛﻢ ]‪.[Pict. Tone‬‬‫‪J Monotone‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍء‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻓﻲ ‪.c Custom Menu X‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Color Space‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(IEC‬‬‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AdobeRGB‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪.Adobe Systems‬‬‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪Movie R On‬‬‫‪OFF ON‬‬‫‪ON‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(Diorama) s‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.O‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ n‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/60‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/60‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ISO 200‬ﻭ‪6400‬؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪5 6 7 89‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪34‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪×10‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪d c b‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪ij‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪q‬‬

‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪250‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪u tsr‬‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫‪v‬‬

‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪121–116 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ .........GPS‬ﺹ‪119 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ..........................Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪108 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪127 .‬‬‫‪ .................................. Share order 6‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪105 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ........................................ 3D‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪ L‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫‪ ........................... PHOTO STORY‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫‪ p m‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ....................... HDR‬ﺹ‪91 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪39 – 22 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪105 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪114 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪104 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪G±10‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪A±10‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪75 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪q‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(o‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪/(p‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )‪(q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(r‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪/(t‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪(s‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫)‪(HIGF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪/(I‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪/(H‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(GF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪ (H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪Fn1‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Fn1‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(79 .‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(79 .‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬

‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬

‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪*My Clips‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫‪Q‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪.(41 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪2015.1‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪14x‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ×‪2‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ×‪14‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[m‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Start‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Interval‬‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ 10‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Slide Interval‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Joy‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ّ .‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .I‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Play Movie‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.H/I‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ F‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Play from Beginning‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫]‪:[Play Movie‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ‬‫]‪:[Delete entire n‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫]‪:[Erase‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،Q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪F‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ )]‪،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫]‪) "([Erase Selected‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪) [Quick Erase] v .‬ﺹ‪(105 .‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪([Share Order‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Share Order‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪ .h‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪.G‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪" v .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪) "([Erase Selected] ،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬ﺹ‪" ،(80 .‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(118 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Share Order‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ H) Motion JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(y‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ )]‪([Erase Selected] ،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ ،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﻲ )ﺹ‪ (77 .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ v‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Add to My Clips‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.H‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 80‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭ ‪.P‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪/My Clips/‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ R‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪) "([Share Order‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j/Y /‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]‪Anti-Shock [i]/Silent [j‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Q‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(144 .‬‬‫‪AR 82‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]‪Anti-Shock [i]/Silent [j‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Shooting Menu 2/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪) Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(83 .‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪) Reset/Myset‬ﺹ‪(84 .‬‬‫‪) Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪) K‬ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪) Image Aspect‬ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫‪) Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫‪/Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse) j/Y/i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ( )ﺹ‪(87 ،86 ،57 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪) Bracketing X‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪) HDR‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪) Multiple Exposure‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪) Keystone Comp.‬ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫]♥[‪) Anti-Shock z/Silent‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫‪) # RC Mode‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y/‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(130 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Format‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [All Erase‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪(Reset‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪[Full‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(144 .‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪(Myset‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ )"‪ .("Myset‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪ .M‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Set‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪" v Myset‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(144 .‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Full] < [Reset‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ" ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(151 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.Myset‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ MySet‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ MySet‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ MySet‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪(Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[Picture Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(68 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y /‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i-a‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Contrast‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫‪Sharpness‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫‪Saturation‬‬‫ﺹ‪69 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Gradation‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ .i-Enhance) Effect‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ(‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪(Monotone) B&W Filter‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪(Monotone) Pict. Tone‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪71 .‬‬

‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Picture Mode Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(K‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ]‪ [K‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(" )ﺹ‪" ،(60 .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(" )ﺹ‪(61 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ ]‪ [W‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،[K Set] .JPEG‬‬‫]‪" v [Pixel Count‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" )ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) "Movie Specification Settings" v‬ﺹ‪(107 .‬‬‫‪85 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ×‪ 2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 86‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،w ،f ،s ،T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪.SCN‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪(j/Y‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [j/Y/i‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y /‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪) [YC‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y Timer‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Start Waiting Time‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻭﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Settings‬‬‫]‪ : [Movie Resolution‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫]‪ : [Frame Rate‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [j/Y/i‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y/‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [Rec View‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ 31‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[C-AF+TR‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [4K‬ﻟـ ]‪.[Movie Resolution] < [Movie Settings‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‪ [4K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪87 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X Shooting Menu 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]‪Anti-Shock [i]/Silent [j‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ t‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،I‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪) WB BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﻦ‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪) A – B‬ﻣﺰﺭﻕ – ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ( ﻭ‪) G – M‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ – ﻣﺨﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬‫‪A-B‬‬‫‪G-M‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) FL BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪) AE BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗُﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1.0 EV‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪7‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.3EV‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪2f 1.0EV -‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(S‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV -‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫‪) ISO BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬‫ﺗُﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1.0 EV‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫]‪" v .[ISO-Auto Set‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪) ART BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬‫ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ART BKT‬ﻭ ‪ WB BKT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) Focus BKT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ [Set number of shots‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪.[Set focus differential‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤًﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻟـ ]‪ [Set focus differential‬ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤًﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻩ ً‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪3f Off‬‬‫‪0.7EV -‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪0 0 3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪Wide‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪Set focus differential‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Narrow‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪ .(HDR‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪ [HDR2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪ .S‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [HDR‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X Shooting Menu 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪3F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ HDR2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ .HDR1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.200‬‬‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪7F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]‪Anti-Shock [i]/Silent [j‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ً‬‫• ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[HDR2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[HDR2]/[HDR1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ .[sRGB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪.[Full-time AF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪91 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﱢ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2f‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1/2‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻃﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﻟـ ]‪ [K‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪" v :RAW‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(97 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪/q‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪/MENU‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪،A ،P‬‬‫‪/M ،S‬ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Overlay‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 92‬‬‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ )‪(Keystone Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [Keystone Comp.‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) D‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ([ )ﺹ‪ (65 .‬ﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Button Function‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Keystone Comp.‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪18 mm‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW + JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‪ i ،h ،g‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ (j‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪/HDR/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪/digital tele-converter/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫]‪ [C-AF‬ﻭ ]‪/full-time AF/[C-AF+TR‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻭ ‪/ART‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪/‬‬‫‪peaking‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟـ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻃﻮﻻ ﺑﺆﺭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫]‪) [Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪.(56 .‬‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ )]♥[‪(Anti-Shockz/Silent‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(57 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]]♥[‪ [Anti-Shockz/Silent‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪Anti-Shockz‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ )‪ .(anti-shock‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[Off‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ‪ (57 .‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(57 .‬‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ♥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫]♥[‪Noise Reduction‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ" )ﺹ‪(133 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪) m‬ﺹ‪(78 .‬‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬‫‪) R‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪) Edit‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪) Print Order‬ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬‫‪) Reset Protect‬ﺹ‪(97 .‬‬‫‪) Connection to Smartphone‬ﺹ‪(117 .‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻔﺔ )‪(R‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﻭ‬‫]‪ .[JPEG Edit‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Current‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Custom1‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Custom2‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪95 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow Adj‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣُﻀﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Redeye Fix‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻭ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[3:4‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1280 × 960‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 640 × 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .320 × 240‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﺻﻼ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺠﻴﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )]‪ ،([Q‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪ [P‬ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ART‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[sRGB‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫]‪(.[YN+RAW‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0 – 0.1‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.q Playback Menu‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 98‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ‪ English‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬‫‪) j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ ‪GF‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫]‪ [Natural‬ﻭ ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﻭﺟﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻮًﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[20sec] – [0.3sec‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[AUTOq‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪117‬‬‫‪c Menu‬‬‫‪Display‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫—‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫—‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.c Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪) AF/MF R‬ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪) Button/Dial S‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪) Release/j T‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪) Disp/8/PC U‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫‪) Exp/p/ISO V‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫‪) # Custom W‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪) K/Color/WB X‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪) Record/Erase Y‬ﺹ‪(105 .‬‬‫‪) Movie Z‬ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫‪) Built-In EVF b‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪) K Utility k‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪AF/MF R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪R‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪Full-time AF‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫—‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪109‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Bulb/Time‬‬‫‪Focusing‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬‫)‪ .(MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ peaking‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪P Set Home‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪p‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪AF Illuminat.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪I Face Priority‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫‪AF Area Pointer‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial‬‬‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪99 AR‬‬‫‪AF/MF R‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪AF Targeting Pad‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪.[AF Targeting Pad‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [AF Targeting Pad‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(50 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪Button/Dial S‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪،[YFunction] ،[VFunction] ،[UFunction‬‬‫]‪،[nFunction] ،[GFunction] ،[IFunction] ،[RFunction‬‬‫]‪[lFunction‬‬‫‪64‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Dial Direction‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Mode Dial‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ MySet‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Release/j T‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Rls Priority S‬‬‫‪Rls Priority C‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) S-AF‬ﺹ‪ (51 .‬ﻭ ‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(51 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪j L fps‬‬‫‪j H fps‬‬‫‪♥j L fps‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [k] ،[T] ،[S‬ﻭ ]‪ .[l‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪58 ,57‬‬‫‪♥j H fps‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪j Image‬‬‫‪Stabilization‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﻂ‪/‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Half Way Rls‬‬‫‪With IS‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) IS‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Lens I.S. Priority‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Release Lag-Time‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Short‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪*.‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬

‫* ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Out‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([PAL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪/A/P‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live SCP‬ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Guide‬ﺹ‪(24 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪Art Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪Scene Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Control‬ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪112‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ"‪"My Clips‬‬‫)ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ( ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪،113‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [X] ،[y] ،[x] ،[w‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Histogram‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Highlight‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪113‬‬‫‪Mode Guide‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[ON1‬ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[ON2‬ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Frame Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [High‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Art LV Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫—‬‫‪101 AR‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 102‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Flicker reduction‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[Auto‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [50Hz‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [60Hz‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪LV Close Up Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪zLock‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Peaking Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Hold‬‬‫—‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Auto Power Off‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Multi Function‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪Menu Recall‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Recall‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪EV Step‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﺘﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫‪Noise Filter‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪ISO Step‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻟـ ‪.ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.[Auto] ISO‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪.M‬‬‫]‪ :[P/A/S‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO200‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[All‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫—‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪AEL Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(110 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Bulb/Time Timer‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ Bulb/Time Monitor‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [TIME] ،[BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[COMP‬‬‫‪Live Bulb‬‬‫‪Live Time‬‬‫‪Composite‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪V‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ )ﺹ‪.(36 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪103 AR‬‬‫‪# Custom W‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪64 ،47‬‬‫‪K/Color/WB X‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪K Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪D Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪W SF‬‬‫‪W N‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Y SF‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪.[W‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Xiddle‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Wmall‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪Xiddle‬‬‫‪Wmall‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shading Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫> ‪All‬‬‫]‪ :[All Set‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺍ ]‪.[CWB‬‬‫]‪ :[All Reset‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬‫]‪ [CWB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫)]‪ ([K4] - [K1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪54‬‬‫—‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪#+WB‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Record/Erase Y‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Quick Erase‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺹ‪.(79 .‬‬‫]‪ :[JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [All Erase‬ﺹ‪.(83 .‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬‫‪ .0001‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪Pmdd0000.jpg :sRGB‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫‪_mdd0000.jpg :Adobe RGB‬‬‫—‬‫‪Priority Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )]‪ [Yes‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([No‬ﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪dpi Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪K/Color/WB X‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪105 AR‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Record/Erase Y‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 63‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[.Copyright Info‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪،2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪05/63‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H‬‬‫‪Delete‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Cancel‬‬‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[Copyright Settings‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪nMode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪ Recording Volume‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪KVolume Limiter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wind Noise‬‬‫‪Reduction‬‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Time Code‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Time Code Mode‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [DF‬ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺼﺤﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ]‪) [NDF‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Count Up‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ (Rec run) [RR‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ]‪ (Free run) [FR‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Starting Time‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Current Time‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .00‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،00:00:00:00‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[Manual Input‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ Motion JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪H‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪.y‬‬‫—‬‫‪n Info Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺃﺣﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Specification‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ SET1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .SET4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪.(61 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Image Size‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ]‪ (Full HD) [FHD‬ﻭ ]‪.[HD‬‬‫]‪ :[Compression/Bit Rate‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬‫)‪.[N](Normal)/[F](Fine)/[SF](Super Fine)/[A-I](All-Intra‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫‪Movie+Photo‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ‪ mode2‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Motion JPEG H‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ y‬ﻛﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪40‬‬‫‪nShutter‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ ،mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫—‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬

‫‪107 AR‬‬‫‪Built-In EVF b‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪V Info Settings‬‬‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [w‬ﻭ]‪ [x‬ﻭ]‪ [y‬ﻭ]‪[X‬‬‫ﻭ]‪ .[x‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [Style 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Auto Switch‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [EVF Auto Luminance‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ .[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Half Way Level‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Built-in EVF Style‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Style 2‬‬‫—‬‫‪S-OVF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [S-OVF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪K Utility k‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪143‬‬‫‪Exposure Shift‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(47 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪: Warning‬‬‫‪Level‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪.8‬‬‫‪Level Adjust‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬‫‪Touch Screen‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪*Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫—‬‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ .[Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪AR 108‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪K Utility k‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Electronic‬‬‫‪Zoom Speed‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Quick Sleep‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫]‪ [Release Lag-Time‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Short‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬

‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ AEL/AFL‬ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode4‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪109 AR‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫]‪[MF Assist‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ .MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﺮ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) [AF Area] v .‬ﺹ‪(48 .‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Peaking Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Peaking‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(64 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.Peaking‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Peaking‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﻤﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫]‪[Video Out] ،[HDMI‬‬‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ّ .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،AV‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [Video Out‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪.(101 .‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪(CB-AVC3 :‬‬‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪(.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪A‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪(.‬‬‫‪AR 110‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.AV‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪1080p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.1080p HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪) [Video Out‬ﺹ‪.(101 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ n‬ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪) [HDMI] v‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(KControl Settings‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫]‪[KControl Settings‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪SCN/ART‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪AR 112‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫]‪[G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪) LV-Info‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [LV-Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪) [Histogram Settings] v .‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫‪) q Info‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [q Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫‪) G Settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺫﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[G Settings‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 100–9‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪2015.1‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬

‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪.(41 .‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫]‪[# Slow Limit] [# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪)/1‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ×‪(2‬‬‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[# X-Sync.‬‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪*[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪[# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬‫* ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫]‪[K Set‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫‪) Y‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫‪X‬‬‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬‫‪W‬‬‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫* ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫‪AR 114‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬‫‪F‬‬‫)ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‬‫‪N‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪B‬‬‫)ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬‫‪*3456×4608‬‬‫‪*2400×3200‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪*960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪*YF‬‬‫‪*YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪*XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪*WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫]‪[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫‪ :Style 1/2‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ :Style 3‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60P‬‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪Style 3‬‬‫‪Style 2/Style 1‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )‪(Style 1/ Style 2‬‬‫‪2 3‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪Sh‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪c b‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪Sh‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫] ﻳﻮﻣﺾ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪39 – 22 .‬‬‫‪ ............................................Myset 3‬ﺹ‪84 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪ 5‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪131 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ..........u‬ﺹ‪109 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪23 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ٍ :‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬‫‪115 AR‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪(OI.Share) OLYMPUS Image Share ،‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬‫‪http://oishare.olympus-imaging.com/‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(157 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share App‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ ،(SSID‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3/3‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪QR‬‬‫‪Preparing Wi-Fi Connection‬‬‫‪Connecting to your‬‬‫‪smartphone.‬‬‫‪Read QR code by‬‬‫‪'OLYMPUS Image Share'.‬‬‫‪SSID‬‬‫‪: E-M10MKII-P-00000001‬‬‫‪Password : 11223344‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪(SSID‬‬‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬‫‪End Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،QR‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ [End Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪" v .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪) "([Share Order‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ‪.(116 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪30‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Image Transfer‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Save‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Remote‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 118‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ‬‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺯﺭ ‪ Add Location‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ .GPS‬ﻻ ﺗﻨ ِﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ g‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .Add Location‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ‬‫‪.GPS‬‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ]‪ [Private‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ]‪[One-Time‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [Private‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ [One-Time‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Connect Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Private‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪ OI.Share‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[One-Time‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .OI.Share‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Select‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Private Password‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 120‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset share Order‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ]‪.[Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (102 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪:USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪:Windows‬‬‫‪/Windows 7 SP1/Windows Vista SP2/Windows XP SP3‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8‬‬‫‪:Macintosh‬‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ – 10.5‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪10.10‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 122‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Windows Photo Gallery‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 8 ،Windows 7 ،Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ ،Windows 8.1‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪[USB Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ (102 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows ‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows XP‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻧﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Windows XP‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬‫"‪ "OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ"‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻣﻦ "‪."http://support.olympus-imaging.com/ov3download/‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "‪ ،"Setup‬ﻓﺎﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪ (OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."LAUNCHER.EXE‬‬‫‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "ﻧﻌﻢ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ"‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[Storage‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪) "Registration‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪123 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪/Windows Vista SP2/Windows XP SP3‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7 SP1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Pentium 4‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2.13‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪Macintosh ‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪–10.5‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪10.10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Intel Core Solo/Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 32,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (102 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[One Moment‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(126 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (102 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫‪Pics/Sheet‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ )ﺣﺠﺰ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫‪AR 126‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫‪(f) Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ‬‫]‪ [Single Print‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫)‪(t‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪ ،[Single Print‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪(u) More‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [All Print‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Option Set‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫×<‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻭ‬‫‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Continue‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ "ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﺤﺠﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫<‬
‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪127 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 128‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Release Lag-Time‬ﺹ‪ (100 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Short‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫)‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺮ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(158 .‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪129 AR‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬‬‫ﻭ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ،"LOCK‬ﻟﻦ‬‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 130‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪) [Eye-Fi] v .‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "LOCK‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪3456×4608‬‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫)‪(Pixel Count‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 10.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 7.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ*‬‫‪55‬‬‫‪88‬‬‫‪127‬‬‫‪274‬‬‫‪409‬‬‫‪172‬‬‫‪285‬‬‫‪559‬‬‫‪836‬‬‫‪300‬‬‫‪442‬‬‫‪859‬‬‫‪1271‬‬‫‪526‬‬‫‪772‬‬‫‪1488‬‬‫‪2179‬‬‫‪753‬‬‫‪1089‬‬‫‪2104‬‬‫‪2906‬‬‫‪1151‬‬‫‪1649‬‬‫‪3051‬‬‫‪4359‬‬‫‪1743‬‬‫‪2441‬‬‫‪4359‬‬‫‪6102‬‬‫‪3814‬‬‫‪5548‬‬‫‪8718‬‬‫‪10171‬‬‫*ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪131 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 132‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .Super FP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪*.‬‬‫* ‪ FL-50R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ 1/180 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫‪،MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 85) GN36‬ﻣﻠﻢ* ( ‪ 24) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ* (‬‫‪FP MANUAL ،FP TTL AUTO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ* (‬‫‪‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN14‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪(1‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN11‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN22‬‬‫–‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،FL-LM3‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪) X Shooting Menu 2‬ﺹ‪.(83 .‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RC‬‬‫‪133 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪.Super FP‬‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LO‬‬‫‪LO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺪﻝ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ #UP‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫‪7m‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪5m‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 134‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ٍ 4‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺘﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/160‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.RC‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 250‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪(RM-UC1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌُﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(11 .‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ f) SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(m‬‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )‪(EP-16‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪(ECG-3‬‬‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬‫‪135 AR‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫‪ECG-3‬‬‫‪EP-16‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬‫ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫‪RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/AV‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻒ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ*‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪/SDHC/SD‬‬‫‪Eye-Fi/SDXC‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 136‬‬

E-M10 Mark II ‫ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬:‫ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬:.Olympus ‫ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬،‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬2‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬*‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬
FCON-P01‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬WCON-P01‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬MCON-P01‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬MCON-P02‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II
4*Teleconverter MC-149‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬Four Thirds ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬1*MMF-3/MMF-2
Four Thirds ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬OM ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬

1

*MF-2

2 OM ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬2

STF-22‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬*TF-222‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬SRF-11*RF-11‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬FC-1.‫ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬Eye-Fi ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬3*
ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO ‫ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬4*

137 AR‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Sleep] v‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻀﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫‪AR 138‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪) [Noise Reduct.] v‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭ ]‪.[Image Aspect‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(17 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪(132 .‬‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ - Pixel Mapping" v .‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(143 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [T‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪139 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(130 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Yes][Format‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ The Image Cannot‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Be Edited‬‬‫‪AR 140‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Internal camera‬‬‫‪temperature is too‬‬‫‪high. Please wait‬‬‫‪for cooling before‬‬‫‪camera use.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Settings Changed‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫‪The lens is locked.‬‬‫‪Please extend the‬‬‫‪lens.‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(15 .‬‬‫‪Please check the‬‬‫‪status of a lens.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪141 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ً .‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 142‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ‪) c Custom Menu‬ﺹ‪ (108 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.k‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪143 AR‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:3*‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬K
v
83
84
68
60
61
59
86
86

87

3* 2* 1*‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬























―
―
jNatural
YN
MOVnFHDF60p
4:3
Off
―











88



―
―
―
―







92





93





Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬0) On(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬0) On
Off
Off

58
133











Bracketing
AE BKT
A– B
WB
BKT
G–M
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT

X

10‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

―




K
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i

j/Y
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Frame
Start Waiting TimeInterval TimeTime Lapse Movie
Movie
FullHD
Movie
Resolution
Settings
10fps Frame Rate



89
90
90
90
91

Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Card Setup W
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode

o
Off
99
00:00:01
00:00:01
Off

Off
1.0EV 3f

89‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

HDR
Frame
Auto Gain
Overlay

Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.

Anti-Sh ockz
Silent[♥]Noise Reduction[♥]Anti-ShockD/Silent♥# RC Mode

AR 144

q Playback Menu
v

3*

2*

78










1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
―

95
95
96
97
97
127
97
117



‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬q‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
Start
BGM
Slide
Slide IntervalMovie Interval

Joy
All
3sec
Short
On
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
R

m

R
Sel. Image

Edit

Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Connection to Smartphoned Setup Menu
v

3*

2*

1*

17
98

10

98



98






120

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

98
98



‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬――،k ±0 ،j ±0
Natural0.5secPrivate―――On―‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬X*W‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬di
Rec View
Wi-Fi Connect Settings
Private Password
Reset share Order
Reset Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi
Settings

c Menu Display
Firmware.‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬c Custom Menuv

99

145 AR

3*

2*

1*

































‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬

mode1
mode2
mode1

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
S-AF
C-AF
Off
S-AF
C-AF
MF
On
On
b

Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬AF/MF R c
AF ModeFull-time AF
AEL/AFL
Reset Lens
Bulb/Time Focusing
Focus Ring

v

99

100

3*






2*

1*



















‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
Off
Off
o
On
K
On
Off

AEL/AFL
Multi Function
Live Guide
64

RREC





*#
*j/Y
P
AF Stop



100





100




















































Off
On
4 fps
8.5 fps
5 fps
11 fpsMF Assist

P Set HomeAF Illuminat.
I Face Priority
AF Area Pointer
AF Targeting Pad
Button/Dial S
UFunction
VFunction
YFunction
RFunction
ButtonFunction
IFunction
GFunctionnFunctionlFunction
P
A
S
M
Menu

Dial
Functionq
Dial Direction
Mode Dial Function
Release/j T
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C

10‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

Ps/F
FNo./F
Shutter/F
Shutter/FNo.
FG/HI
Prev/Next/G/U
Dial1
Exposure
Dial1
Ps
Off

MagnifyPeaking‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬AF/MF R c

j L fpsj H fps♥j L fps♥j H fps

S-I.S. Auto

Still Picture

M-IS1
Off
On
Off
Normal

Movie

Image
Stabilizer

j Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Release Lag-Time.[Direct Function] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬nFunction] ‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬AR 146

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Disp/8/PC U c‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
1080p
Off




―



101








































10













‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬






















Live Guide
Live SCPArt Menu
Scene Menu
Overall ،Image Only
،(u) Custom1 ،Image Only
Level Gauge) Custom2(Display"My Clips" ،Calendar ،O
playbackOff‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
255
0
On
On1
On2
Off
Off
Normal
mode1
Auto
mode2
Off
White
Normal
On

102















147 AR

Hold
1min

4h
On

Auto
،Magnify ،Color Creator ،rWB/oISO ،rISO/oWB
S-OVF، Image Aspect
RecallHDMI OutHDMI Control

HDMI

Video Out
iAUTO
P/A/S/M KControl
Settings
ART
SCN
q Info
LV-Info

G/InfoSettings

G Settings
Displayed Grid
Picture Mode Settings
Highlight Histogram
Settings
Shadow
Mode Guide
M
BULB/TIME Live View
Boost
COMP
OthersFrame Rate
Art LV Mode
Flicker reduction
LV Close Up ModezLock
Peaking Color
Highlight
Peaking
Intensity
Settings
Image
Brightness Adj.
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Off
8
USB Mode
Multi Function Settings
Menu Recall

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬





































1/3EV
Auto
Standard
Auto
1/3EV
1600 :High Limit
200 :Default
P/A/S‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Exp/p/ISO V c
EV Step
Noise Reduct.
Noise Filter
ISO
ISO Step‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ISO-Auto Set



p
Auto
8min
-7
Off
0.5 sec
1 sec

ISO-Auto
Metering
AEL Metering
Bulb/Time Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings





1/250

# X-Sync.







1/60

# Slow Limit







Off

w+F
K/Color/WB X







103






































# Custom W
104


























105


K4 WN

G : 0 ،A : 0
—
—

K Set

2400×3200
960×1280
OffAuto

Xiddle
Pixel
Count
Wmall
Shading Comp.
WB
All SetAll >All Reset





On

W Keep Warm ColorWB Auto





sRGB

WB+#
Color Space10‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬104

،K3 XN ،K2 YN ،K1 YF

AR 148

v

3*

2*

1*













‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬Off
RAW+JPEG
Reset
Off
No
350dpi
Off



105








106

—
—
P

nMode



On
±0
On
Off



(Drop Frame) DF(Rec Run) RR—

Movie R
Recording Volume
KVolume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
Time Code
Time
Mode
Code
Count Up
Settings
Starting Time‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬n Info Settings




106










107

10



،n2 FHD K ،n1 FHD F
n4 FHD G ،n3 FHD F
On
mode1



mode1



Style 3Custom1 ،Basic Information
Level) Custom2 ،(u)(Gauge Display
Off
On




‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬108



149 AR













‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Record/Erase Y c
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
File Name
Edit Filename
Priority Set
dpi Settings
Copyright Info.
Copyright
Artist Name
Settings
Copyright Name
Movie Z‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬



On



On
Off





Movie Specification Settings
Movie EffectMovie+Photo ModenShutter Function
Built-In EVF b
Built-in EVF Style
V Info Settings
V Displayed Grid
EVF Auto Switch
EVF Auto
EVF
Luminance
AdjustV Half Way Level
S-OVF

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬K Utility k c
Pixel Mapping‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

—


108

±0



±0



—



On
On
NormalNormal





On

109




p
ExposureJ
Shift
5: Warning Level
Level Adjust
Touch Screen Settings
Eye-FiStill Picture
Electronic
Movie Zoom Speed
Quick Sleep Mode

3 sec

Backlit LCD

3 sec

Sleep

10
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬AR 150‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ ."Myset‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Myset4‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Full‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺹ‪ (84 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.W 1‬‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟـ "‪ "Myset‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪ (64 .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪) "Mode Dial Function]"R AF/MF‬ﺹ‪ (100 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪" v .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪) "(Myset‬ﺹ‪(84 .‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Myset1‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪KControl Settings‬‬‫‪M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪Live Control‬‬‫‪101‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Myset2‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Button/Dial‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪YFunction‬‬‫‪64‬‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Myset3‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫‪Button/Dial‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪YFunction‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪64‬‬‫‪151 AR‬‬

Myset4v

Myset4 ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬Custom Menu c
Button/Dial(Digital Tele-converter) b
64

100

MF

IFunction

I/H

GFunction

Direct Function

nFunction

F/w

P

Dial Function

Live SCPiAUTOKControl Settings

Button Function

Disp/8/PC

101

102

S

UFunction

U

Displayed Grid

w
On2

COMP

On1

OthersLive View Boost

8 sec

Backlit LCD(‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬/ISO ‫ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬eMulti Function Settings
K/Color/WB

U

WB

108

w

V Displayed Grid

54

U

Built-In EVF

X
b

10
WB

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬104

AR 152‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ LCD ،‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ "‪ 3.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1,040,000‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(3 : 2‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫‪ 60 - 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds Standard‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ "‪Live MOS 4/3‬‬‫‪ 17,200,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 16,050,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2,360,000‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪100%‬‬‫‪ 19.2‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ –1‬ﻡ‪ (-1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ 81‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪) 20 - –2 EV‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪(ISO100 ،M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ :P/iAUTO :A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :A/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :S/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ :M/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪/‬‬‫‪ :ART/PHOTO STORY :J‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ :SCN/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ :n/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪ 1 ،1/3) 25600 - 200 ،LOW‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪ 1 ،1/2 ،1/3) ±5 EV‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪153 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫‪ SDXC ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻭ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UHS-II‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪) JPEG ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ )‪ ،((DCF‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،RAW‬‬‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬‫‪ ،Exif 2.3‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭ‪،PRINT Image Matching III‬‬‫ﻭ‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Wave‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ 48 PCM ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(T‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 4 :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫‪• ISO100 ) 5.8‬ﻡ( ) ‪• ISO200 ) 8.2‬ﻡ((‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻢ ) ‪ 24‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪MANUAL/(TTL‬‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪/(AV‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 119.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 83.1‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 46.7‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 399‬ﺟﻢ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20 /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫‪) 90% - 30%‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) 90% - 10%/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ٌ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬‫‪AR 154‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‬‫‪ 7.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1210‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 35.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 12.8‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 46‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 8.35‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 400 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒَﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫‪ 62‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 38‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 83‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬‫‪ 70‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪155 AR‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 156‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ — ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ — ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ — ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ — ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﻮﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮَﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ )ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ُ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺒﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﺮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗُﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬‫ﻃﻔﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪157 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 158‬‬

‫•‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ ٍﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ً‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ُﻋ ً‬‫ﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻀﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ( ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫•‬‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﺛﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻑء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺷﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻮﻛﺒﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻎ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪159 AR‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬‫‪ 2006/66/EC‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍ ًء‬‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Olympus‬‬‫ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 160‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬‫"‪ "CE‬ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS CORPORATION.‬ﻭ‬‫‪Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ‪ E-M10MarkII‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪.EC/1999/5‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus-europa.com/‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ً‬‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬‫ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻨﺎءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻴﻚ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://consumer-service.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﻨﻪ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ( ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﺰﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪.Alliance‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬‫"ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ "DCF/‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺺ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫)‪.(JEITA‬‬‫• ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE‬‬‫‪AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR‬‬‫‪THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE‬‬‫‪VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC‬‬‫)‪STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii‬‬‫‪DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED‬‬‫‪BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL‬‬‫‪AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR‬‬‫‪WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER‬‬‫‪LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO‬‬‫‪LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE‬‬‫‪IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL‬‬‫‪INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM‬‬‫‪MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE‬‬‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫)ﺟـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺜﺎﻟﻴﻦ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﻗﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺒﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬‫ﻷﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Eye-Fi,‬‬‫‪.Inc‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Apical‬‬‫ّ‬‫‪.Limited‬‬‫‪،Micro Four Thirds، Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭ ‪Four‬‬‫‪ Thirds‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS CORPORATION‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/‬‬‫‪digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm‬‬‫‪161 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬100 ...............................AF Targeting Pad
99 ،51 ........................................ AF Mode
104 ............................................. All >94 ........................................... Anti-Shock
39 ...............................................Art Fade
101 .......................................Art LV Mode28 ،22 ............................ (‫ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ART
102 ...........(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬Auto Focus Sound
33 ......................... (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬A

B
102 ........................................Backlit LCD
88 ................................. BKT (Bracketing)88 ............................................Bracketing
35 ................................................... BULB
99 .............................Bulb/Time Focusing
103 ............................. Bulb/Time Monitor
103 ................................ Bulb/Time Timer
100 ،64 ........................... Button Function

C
51 .................................................... C-AF
51 ............................................. C-AF+TR
83 .......................................... Card Setup
52 ....................................... Color Creator
105 .......................................Color Space103 ........................... Composite Settings
117 ................Connection to Smartphone
106 ............................. Copyright Settings
99 ............................... Custom Menu (c)D
100 ..................................... Dial Direction
100 ......................................Dial Function
86 ،65 .....................Digital Tele-converter
101 ................................... Displayed Grid
105 ........................................dpi Settings

E
105 .....................................Edit Filename
109 ..................... Electronic Zoom Speed‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬133 .......................................# RC Mode98 ...................................................... W
98 .................................. c Menu Display
99 .....................................P Set Home99 ،49 ......................I (Face Priority AF)
100 ........................................... j H fps
100 ............................................ j L fps
101 ................................ G/Info Settings
101 ...........................K Control Settings
102 ...................................zPreview lock104 ......................................Slow Limit #114 ،104 ................................. .X-Sync #104 ............................................... w+F
105 ............................................... WB+#
108 ........................... Warning Level 8
65 ................................................ I/H
77 ...................................(‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬G
77 ...........................(‫ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬U
106 ............................................ n Mode79 ..................................(‫ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬80 .................................... (‫ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬v
79 ...........................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬0
105 ....................... W Keep Warm Color
95 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬R
104 .............................................. K Set
102 ....................................(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬8
80 ..................................... (‫ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬R
98 .............................(‫ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬i78 .................................. (‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬m
100 ..................... j Image Stabilization
38 ،24 ،22......................... (A) iAUTO
133 .................... RC Mode (# RC Mode)
108 ......................................... S-OVF n

A
71 .......................................... AdobeRGB
109 ............................................ AEL/AFL
103 .....................................AEL Metering.AF Illuminat
99 ...................(‫)ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬AR 162

M
35 ..................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬M
98 ......... (Menu Display (c Menu Display
65 ....................................................... MF
110 ،99 ..................................... MF Assist
51 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬MF
100 ............................Mode Dial Function
101 ....................................... Mode Guide
39 .........................................Movie Effect
40 ............................. Movie+Photo Mode
40 ........................... Movie Tele-converter
39 ............................................Multi Echo
41 ...............................................My Clips
84 ................................................... Myset

N
103 ........................................ Noise Filter
103 .................................... .Noise ReductO
39 .................................... One Shot EchoP
32 ......................................(‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬P
26 ............................................... Panning
27 ............................................ Panorama
102 ................................Peaking Settings
30 ...................................PHOTO STORY85 ،68 ................................. Picture Mode
101 ....................... Picture Mode Settings
104 ........................................ Pixel Count143 .................................... Pixel Mapping
102 ..................................... Preview Lock
125 ................................................... Print
105 ......................................... Priority Set

Q
105 ....................................... Quick Erase

163 AR

103 ............................................. EV Step
108 ................................... Exposure Shift108 ................................................ Eye-FiF
105 .......................................... File Name
98 ..............................................Firmware
102 ................................ Flicker reduction
99 .......................................... Focus Ring
83 ............................ Format (Card setup)
99 ......................................... Full-time AF

H
100 ......................... Half Way Rls With IS
101 ................................................. HDMI
91 .....................................................HDR
52 ...................Highlight&Shadow Control
101 ............................ Histogram SettingsI
56 ...................................Image Stabilizer
101 ......... Info Settings (G/Info Settings)
103 ،53 .............................................. ISO
103 ............................................ISO-Auto
103 ..................................... ISO-Auto Set
103 ............................................ ISO StepJ
96 ............................................ JPEG Edit

K
93 .................................. .Keystone CompL
100 ................................ Lens I.S. Priority
108 ....................................... Level Adjust
113 ............................................Light Box
103 ............................................Live Bulb
103 ........................................... Live Time
35 ........................................... LIVE TIME
101 ................................. Live View Boost‫‪R‬‬‫ﺍ‬‫‪60 .................................................... RAW‬‬‫‪95 .................................... RAW Data Edit‬‬‫‪105 ............................ RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫‪106 ............................. Recording Volume‬‬‫‪98 ............................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪100 ............................. Release Lag-Time‬‬‫‪84 ................................................... Reset‬‬‫‪99 .......................................... Reset Lens‬‬‫‪97 .......................................Reset Protect‬‬‫‪100 .................................. Rls Priority C/S‬‬‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪59 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪68 .............................‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪80 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪76 .............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪77 ،76 .....................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪79 ،76 ................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪77 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪43 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪44 ،43 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪130 ،14 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪46 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪64 ..............................w‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪122 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪77 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪37 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪99 ،49 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪50 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪49 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪51 ................................... (MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪123 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪22 ...................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪39 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪22 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪87 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪57 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ‪36 .........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪36 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪35 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪35 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬‫)‪35 ................................... (BULB/TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪92 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪65 ،24 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪75 ،49 ،21.................................. INFO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪120 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪13 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪131 ،60 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ‪18 ..................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪74 ............................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪18 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪53 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪57 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪91 ......................(HDR‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪) S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪34 .................................‬‬‫‪51 .................................................... S-AF‬‬‫‪51 ............................................. S-AF+MF‬‬‫‪) SCN‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪26 ،22 .............................‬‬‫)‪99 ..................Set Home (P Set Home‬‬‫‪104 ...................................Shading Comp‬‬‫‪102 ،16 ........................................... Sleep‬‬‫‪) Small Target‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ‪48 ........‬‬‫‪108 ................................................S-OVF‬‬‫‪71 ................................................... sRGB‬‬‫‪) Super Spot AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪50 ..............................................‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪65 ..........................................Test Picture‬‬‫‪87 ............................... Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫‪108 .......................Touch Screen Settings‬‬‫‪110 ...................................................... TV‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪102 ......................................... USB Mode‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪101 ...........................................Video Out‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪104 ،54 ...............................................WB‬‬‫‪120 .................................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪106 ....................... Wind Noise Reduction‬‬‫‪AR 164‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪79 ......................................................‬‬‫‪83 ........................................... All Erase‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪79 ...................................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪80 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺏ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪130 .............................................. SD‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪83 ....................................... SD‬‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪29 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪95 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪97 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪51 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪51 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪97 ،80 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪78 ....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪51 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪47 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪64 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪32 ....................................... (%‬‬

‫ﺡ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ > ‪127 .....................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪131 ............................................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪60 .............................................‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪61 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪53 .............................................ISO‬‬‫ﺽ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪17 ................................. X‬‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪133 ........................‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪61 ،44 .................................‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ ‪68 ،28 ...........................................‬‬‫‪106 ،72 ....................................... Movie R‬‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪95 .......................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪98 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪83 ............................................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪109 ،65 ،18............‬‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪112 ،45 ..............‬‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪66 .................... Multi Function‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪28 .............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪62 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪16 ...................................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪65 ......................................................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪119 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪21 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪48 ..........................(P‬‬‫ﻥ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪59 ...............................‬‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪51 .................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪26 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻉ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪114 ،81 ،77 ...............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪78 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪114 ،81 ،77 .............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪21 ...................................‬‬‫‪165 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2015.04.‬‬‫‪WC792002‬‬